OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT
®
500e
FIAT
®
500e
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17BEV24-126-AA
2374727 2017 Domestic Fiat 500E OM Cover.indd 1 6/8/16 8:29 AM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................117
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................171
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES .................................................219
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE ..................................................237
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................273
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . ..........................................277
10
INDEX .....................................................................283
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FIAT 500e. Be
assured that your 500e represents an elegant marriage
of technology and Italian styling that is as good for the
environment as it is fun to drive!
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation, understanding and
maintenance of your 500e. It is supplemented by War-
ranty Information, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services
that FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions
for maintaining its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer-
encing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your autho-
rized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-
trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or through-
out this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAU-
TIONS against procedures that could result in damage
to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s
Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on
the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears
engraved on the right front door sill, under the sill scuff
plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door
opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and
title.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 IMPORTANT VEHICLE INFORMATION .......9
▫ High Voltage Battery ....................9
䡵 500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES ........11
▫ Audible Pedestrian Warning System ........11
▫ Single-Speed Transmission ...............11
▫ Auto Park...........................11
▫ E-Park .............................11
▫ Climate Control (HVAC System)...........12
▫ Electric Air Conditioning Compressor .......12
▫ Electric Power Steering .................12
▫ Smartphone Features ...................13
䡵 HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION . . .14
▫ SAE J1772 Charging Inlet ................14
▫ AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp) .......15
▫ AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp) .......26
▫ Charge Times ........................27
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ............28
▫ Ignition Key Removal ..................28
▫ Locking Doors With A Key...............29
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ...............29
䡵 SENTRY KEY .........................29
▫ Replacement Keys ....................30
▫ General Information ...................30
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM .............31
▫ To Arm The System....................31
▫ To Disarm The System .................31
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ...............32
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate .........32
2
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors
1stPress ...........................32
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ...........32
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ............33
▫ General Information ...................34
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ........................35
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped .........36
▫ Auto Door Locks .....................36
䡵 POWER WINDOWS ....................37
▫ Power Window Switches ................37
▫ Auto-Down .........................37
▫ Wind Buffeting ......................37
䡵 LIFTGATE ...........................38
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........38
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .......38
▫ Important Safety Precautions .............38
▫ Seat Belt Systems .....................40
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).......49
▫ Child Restraints ......................60
▫ Transporting Pets .....................75
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................76
▫ Transporting Passengers.................76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................76
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................78
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
IMPORTANT VEHICLE INFORMATION
Your 500e operates entirely on electricity stored in the
high voltage battery. Unlike a conventional vehicle or
Hybrid there is no internal combustion engine. Battery
Electric Vehicles have unique operating characteristics
that you should become familiar with to ensure you are
getting the optimal performance from your vehicle.
High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high
voltage battery that is used to power the electric pow-
ertrain systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the vehicle.
The high voltage battery is maintenance free and de-
signed to last for the life of the vehicle.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
• Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
• Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately 3 percent of their charge per
month.
• Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
1 — High Voltage Cables
2 — High Voltage Battery
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
• Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis-
charged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the rear passenger seat lower cushion. If your
vehicle requires service, see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Never try to remove the high voltage service dis-
connect. The high voltage service disconnect is used
when your vehicle requires service by a trained
technician at an authorized dealer. Failure to follow
this warning can cause severe burns or electrical
shock that may result in serious injury or death.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Manage-
ment System that is designed to:
• Ensure safe operation
• Maximize driving range
• Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
• During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking
noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When
the ignition key is turned to the on position, the high
voltage battery contactors inside the battery are
closed to make the stored electricity inside available
for vehicle use. The clicking noise observed is the
sound of these contactors as they open and close and
is normal operation for your 500e.
• The operating temperature range of the high voltage
battery is -22 °F to 122 °F (-30 °C to 50 °C). If it is
attempted to operate the vehicle with the battery
outside of these temperature extremes it will not
function.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES
Understanding the unique characteristics of your 500e
will help ensure maximum performance and the best
driving range from your vehicle.
Your 500e is equipped with two electrical systems; a 12
Volt system that is used to power the conventional
electrical system and a high voltage system, which is
used to drive the wheels through a single-speed trans-
mission as well as other high voltage system compo-
nents.
Your 500e operates differently then a traditional vehicle
or Hybrid vehicle. Here are some of the main differ-
ences:
Audible Pedestrian Warning System
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning System. The Audible Pedestrian Warning Sys-
tem uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that your
vehicle is approaching.
The audible warning system uses an in-car sound
synthesizer with a speaker located in the underhood
compartment. The warning system is automatically
activated when selecting DRIVE or REVERSE.
In DRIVE range, the system will remain active until the
vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 22 mph
(35.5 km/h). At approximately 22 mph (35.5 km/h), the
warning system is deactivated and will automatically
be active when the vehicle returns to approximately
20 mph (32 km/h).
Single-Speed Transmission
Instead of a traditional transmission, your vehicle is
equipped with a single-speed transmission to transfer
the torque from the E-Drive motor to the drive wheels.
This transmission requires no maintenance and is de-
signed to operate for the life of the vehicle.
Auto Park
Auto Park will automatically place the transmission
into PARK if there is an indication that the driver may
leave the vehicle while still in the DRIVE, NEUTRAL or
REVERSE gear. Refer to “Single-Speed Transmission” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
E-Park
The parking pawl is traditionally located inside an
automatic transmission and activated when the vehicle
is placed in the PARK position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
E-Park is activated when the driver pushes the PARK
button. An electric motor activates the parking pawl
and locks the single-speed transmission when the ve-
hicle is placed into PARK. This will prevent any un-
wanted movement of the vehicle.
NOTE: The engagement of the E-Park can be heard
when there is no noise in the interior of the vehicle, this
is a normal condition.
Climate Control (HVAC System)
Your 500e is equipped with an Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) HVAC system. This HVAC system uti-
lizes a humidity sensor, cabin sensor, and ambient
temperature sensor to choose operation mode and
control cabin comfort. These components allow the
controller to operate the HVAC system in a very effi-
cient manner to maximize driving range.
Your 500e also uses an electric air heater to provide heat
to the cabin.
Electric Air Conditioning Compressor
Your 500e uses an electric air conditioning compressor.
The air conditioning compressor is powered by the high
voltage battery system and is used to cool the vehicle
occupants and the high voltage battery while the ve-
hicle is being driven or when it is being charged.
The high voltage battery may require cooling to keep
the vehicle running. The air conditioning compressor
will activate without any input from the occupant.
NOTE: The AC system helps cool the high voltage
battery. If the air conditioning system should require
service, see your Authorized Dealer as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power Steer-
ing (EPS) system. The power steering system requires
no maintenance and operates without the use of power
steering fluid.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Smartphone Features
With the “Uconnect Access” app, you can monitor the
state of charge of the high voltage battery or initiate
charging from your phone. You can also turn on your
vehicle’s climate control system remotely. The app
provides the following features:
• Monitor battery charge level
• Display available driving distance
• Check charging status
• Remotely activate vehicle climate control system
• Unlock and lock doors
• Assist with locating your vehicle
• Locate charging stations
• Send a point-of-interest to your vehicle’s navigation
system
• Schedule a charge
• View energy consumed
• Notifications for charging and preconditioning
events
How do I get the “Uconnect Access” smartphone App?
Visit the 500e registration website:
www.fiatusa.com/500eRegistration
Once in the registration website, you will need to enter
your vehicle’s VIN and Connectivity ID. The connectiv-
ity ID is found in the vehicle’s instrument cluster. To
locate the connectivity ID follow the steps below:
1. Push the menu button on the instrument cluster.
2. Choose “Settings” and scroll down to the “Connec-
tivity ID.”
Registration Website
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
3. Select “Connectivity ID.”
After obtaining the connectivity ID and VIN number
return to the vehicle registration website and perform
the following:
1. After entering the VIN (Vehicle Identification Num-
ber), Connectivity ID and your email address, click
“submit.”
2. You will now be asked to fill in your contact infor-
mation and a user name and password.
3. Once finished with registration you will be directed
to your 500e owner’s site.
4. From the 500e owner’s site you will be able to
download the 500e Uconnect Access mobile applica-
tion and learn how to use your connected features.
5. Use your owner’s site username and password for
logging into the 500e Uconnect Access mobile appli-
cation.
NOTE: Your smartphone must have a valid data con-
nection to use the 500e Uconnect Access mobile appli-
cation.
Need help with registration?
Please call the Uconnect Call Center Toll Free number
below:
(855) 792-4241
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772
charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1
(120V) and AC Level 2 (240V) charging.
SAE J1772 Charge Receptacle
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The charge inlet door locks and unlocks with
the vehicle doors.
AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a charging cordset. AC Level 1 charging
requires a conventional NEMA 5-15 120 Volt AC
grounded wall receptacle along with the charging cord-
set provided with the vehicle.
WARNING!
Shock, fire, property damage, or personal injury
may occur if the Portable EVSE Cordset is not used
properly. There are no serviceable parts contained
in the Portable EVSE Cordset. Any attempt to
service it may result in shock, fire, property dam-
age, or personal injury.
To access the charging cordset, remove the Level 1 EVSE
from its storage bin by lifting the rear cargo cover.
Charging Cord Set
EVSE Rear Cargo Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: The charging cordset is used for AC Level 1
charging only.
WARNING!
• Read all the instructions before using this prod-
uct.
• Unattended children must not have access to the
working Portable EVSE Cordset.
• Do not put fingers or objects into the Charge
Connector.
• Do not use this product if the flexible power cord
or Electric Vehicle (EV) Cable is frayed, broken,
has cracked insulation or any other signs of
damage.
• Do not use this product if the enclosure or the
Charge Connector is broken, cracked, open, or
shows any other indication of damage.
• Do not use Portable EVSE Cordset with an exten-
sion cord. Use of an extension cord may cause
burns, fire, or other damage or injury.
• This device may attempt to reset and run after an
interruption
EVSE Charging Cordset
The EVSE charging cordset is compliant with SAE
J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted with
the standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The EVSE in-
cludes:
• An AC Power Cord with NEMA 5–15p, Right Angle
plug
• An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV- rated
• A Charge Connector
• A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a charge current
interrupt device (CCID) with status indicator display
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Charging Cordset Operation
1. Plug the AC plug of the charging cordset into a 15A,
or 20A, 120VAC, 60Hz, grounded wall receptacle. Do
not use an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a
worn outlet. The charging cordset will not operate
safely unless it is plugged directly into the wall
receptacle.
WARNING!
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding
conductor could result in a risk of electric shock.
Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if
you are in doubt as to whether the wall receptacle is
properly grounded. Do not modify the plug pro-
vided with the product – if it does not fit the outlet,
you must have a proper outlet installed by a quali-
fied electrician.
Charging Cord Set
1 — Charge Connector
2 — Charging Cordset Enclo-
sure
3—ChargeCable
4 — AC Plug
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2. Check to see if the charging cordset is ready to
charge by reviewing the indicator lights. After a brief
self-check, where the indicator light will flash, a
green AC indicator light and two green charge rate
indicator lights indicate that the cordset is ready for
use.
3. If the charging cordset is ready to charge, ensure the
vehicle is in PARK, and then connect the charge
connector to the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear
a “click” when the charge connector is inserted
correctly and coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the Charge
Rate Indicator Lights will cycle from left to right, and
then both turn off. This pattern will repeat while the
vehicle is charging. The lights are illuminated at the
rate of approximately one cycle per second.
Cordset Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator
Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Charge Rate Indicator
Lights
Inserting The Charge Connector Into The Vehicle
Charge Inlet
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automati-
cally. If not, please check the following:
• Charging Cordset - The charging cordset status
indicators illuminate green or red to identify the
charging cordset status. Refer to “Troubleshooting
Using The Status Indicator Display” in this section
for further information on the charging cordset
status.
• Wall Receptacle – Check whether the wall recep-
tacle is functional (no power outage) and/or plug
the charging cordset into a different wall receptacle.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether or not the
charging schedules have been enabled. If enabled,
check that you are within the scheduled time and
date. If a charging schedule has been enabled and
you are outside the time and date, you may over-
ride the schedule for this charging event by plug-
ging in the charge connector, unplugging it, and
then plugging it back into the vehicle charge inlet.
Complete the double plug sequence within 10
seconds for it to override the set schedule.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the vehicle
side connector first and then the charging cordset
from the wall receptacle. To disengage the vehicle
coupler, push the button on the charge connector
before removing the connector from the vehicle
charge inlet.
6. Close the inlet door.
NOTE: It is good practice to keep the ignition in the
OFF position while conducting Level 1 Charging. This
minimizes any additional vehicle loads the EVSE has to
support which extend the charging time.
Removing The Charge Connector From The Vehicle
Charge Inlet
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Troubleshooting Using The Status Indicator
Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The AC Power Indicator displays the status and safety
of the input power. If this indicator is green, the power
is within acceptable limits to charge the vehicle. If only
the AC Power Indicator is flashing red, then there is a
problem with the AC power at the electrical outlet. If
the AC Power Indicator does not return to green, then
the outlet should be inspected by a licensed electrician
to ensure the voltage, frequency, and grounding are
complaint to national and local electrical codes and
ordinances. It may be possible to attempt charging from
a different outlet.
The Fault Indicator displays the status of the Portable
EVSE Cordset and the vehicle connection. The Portable
EVSE Cordset will not allow charging while the fault
indicator is red. If it is off, the Portable EVSE Cordset
has not detected any internal faults, or faults with the
vehicle connection. If the Fault Indicator is flashing red,
there is a fault detected either with the Portable EVSE
Cordset, electronics, or with the vehicle connection. The
Portable EVSE Cordset may attempt to retry to provide
current to the vehicle if the fault is cleared. If the Fault
Indicator does not attempt to provide charge to the
vehicle, the charge connector will need to be removed
from the vehicle to clear the fault.
The fault code list in the table below provides a
reference for the important faults that are detected by
the Portable EVSE Cordset. When a fault is detected, the
AC Power Indicator, the Fault Indicator, or both the AC
Power and Fault Indicators will flash red. If only the AC
Power Indicator is red, there is a problem on the AC
Power side of the unit. If only the Fault Indicator is
flashing red, there is a problem internal to the unit or
with the vehicle. If both the AC Power and Fault
Indicators are flashing red, an over temperature condi-
tion is detected at either the AC plug or within the
enclosure. Additional information about the faults is
provided by a fault code that is displayed on the two
green Charge Rate Indicators. The fault code consists of
four digits, each with a value of 1 or 2. The value of a
digit is the number of indicators illuminated for that
part of the sequence. For example, fault code (1, 2, 1, 1)
will display the following sequence: One indicator will
illuminate for (0.3 seconds), then two indicators will
illuminate, then one indicator, and finally one indicator
will illuminate. After all four fault code digits have been
displayed, the indicators will remain off for one second
before repeating the sequence.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication Recommended Actions
1, 2, 2, 2 AC Power Vehicle Current Draw
is Too High
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service
location.
1, 1, 2, 1 AC Power Incorrect Electrical
Supply
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC
Supply (house wiring).
1, 1, 2, 2 AC Power Incorrect Electrical
Supply
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC
Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 1, 1 AC Power Incorrect Electrical
Supply
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC
Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 1, 2 AC Power Incorrect Electrical
Supply
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC
Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 2, 1 AC Power Outlet Wiring Bad
Ground
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC
Supply (house wiring).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
1, 1, 1, 1 Fault Portable EVSE Cord-
set Internal Fault
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge
inlet and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check
the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
1, 1, 1, 2 Fault Portable EVSE Cord-
set Internal Fault
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge
inlet and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check
the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
1, 2, 1, 1 Fault Portable EVSE Cord-
set Internal Fault
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service
location.
1, 2, 1, 2 Fault CCID Leakage Cur-
rent Detected
Disconnect charge connector and retry charging. If problem
persists, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a
service location.
2, 2, 2, 1 Fault Vehicle Interface Con-
nector
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check
for water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet
or charge connector.
2, 2, 2, 2 Fault Vehicle Interface Con-
nector
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check
for water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet
or charge connector
1, 1, 2, 1 Fault & AC
Power
EVSE Enclosure Inter-
nal Temperature is
Too High
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset housing may be
hot. It is recommended to move the Portable EVSE Cordset
out of direct sun exposure. Allow the unit to cool. If error
persists, check the Portable EVSE Cordset at a service
location.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
1, 1, 1, 2 Fault & AC
Power
Hot AC Power Plug
Warning
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug
may be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit
from the wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to
charge the vehicle at a different wall outlet. Contact a certi-
fied electrician to inspect/replace the wall outlet that was
associated with the Hot AC Plug event. Charging will still
occur, but at a reduced rate.
1, 1, 1, 1 Fault & AC
Power
AC Power Plug Over
Temperature
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug
may be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit
from the wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to
charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a certified
electrician to inspect/replace the outlet that was associated
with the Hot AC Plug event.
FCC Notice:
This unit has systems that operate on a radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communica-
tions Commission (FCC) rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
This unit complies with ICES-003E of Industry Canada,
and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
• Ensure the charging cable is positioned so it will not
be stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to
damage or stress.
• There are no user serviceable parts inside.
• Do not use the charging cordset if it is visibly
damaged. Contact your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
• Do not allow children to operate this device. Adult
supervision is mandatory when children are in prox-
imity when the charging cordset is in use.
NOTE: During normal operation, the charge connector
or AC plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during
charging, unplug the charging cordset and have a
qualified electrician inspect the wall receptacle before
you continue charging.
WARNING!
Do not use the charging cordset with a receptacle
that is worn or damaged. Using the charging cordset
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
with a worn or damaged receptacle may cause burns
or start a fire.
Vehicle Charge Indicators
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Gauge
There is a battery gauge indicator located on the instru-
ment cluster. The battery gauge will display, with
progressive color indication, the current state of charge
for the high voltage battery; with the percentage value
located at the bottom of the gauge.
High Voltage Battery Gauge
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Charge Low And Limited Power Messages
The state of charge is monitored during normal opera-
tion. If the state of charge reaches certain thresholds the
following messages will also be displayed on the clus-
ter:
• charge low — displayed at 17% (warning displayed
for six seconds).
• charge low — displayed at 11% (Displayed for six
seconds).
• charge low limited power mode — turtle displayed
at 5% and remains on.
• charge low limited power mode — turtle flashes at
0% until condition changes.
NOTE: The limited power mode can also be activated if
the high voltage battery temperature is too high or too
low.
NOTE: At 0% state of charge or below the following
features will be disabled if in use:
• Heated Seats
• Electronic Speed Control
• Climate Controls
Charge Low Message
Charge Low Limited Power Mode
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery gauge your vehicle is
equipped with a visual state of charge indicator. The
state of charge indicator is made up of five lights that
are mounted to the center of the instrument panel.
The state of charge indicator represents the current state
of charge for the high voltage battery. The state of
charge indicator lights quickly to identify the battery
state of charge while the vehicle is being charged. Each
light represents the battery’s current percentage of
charge.
NOTE: In the event of an error in the charging process
the outer two lights will blink.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery
Charge
1 Light 0 – 20%
2 Lights 21 – 40%
3 Lights 41 – 60%
4 Lights 61 – 80%
5 Lights 81 – 100%
AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp)
AC Level 2 (240V) charging requires a 240V, Level 2
EVSE (Charging station). A 30A Level 2 EVSE for home
installation is recommended.
When using public charging stations, ensure the charg-
ing station is ready to provide charge and the vehicle is
in PARK before the charge connector is plugged into the
vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and is coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inlet. The vehicle should start
charging automatically. If not, please check the instruc-
tions at the charging station.
State Of Charge Indicator
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automati-
cally. If not, please check the following:
• Charging Station – Check the indications and instruc-
tions at the charging station.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is
currently within the scheduled charge time/date. If
the charging schedule is enabled, you may override
them for this charging event by plugging in the
charge connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within 10 seconds for it to
override the set schedule.
To stop the charging process, disconnect the charge
connector from the vehicle inlet.
Charge Times
The following factors determine the time it takes to
charge the high voltage battery:
• The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
• What level EVSE is being used (Level 1 – 120V or
Level 2 – 240V)
• Ambient temperature
• Whether the vehicle is on during charging
NOTE:
• The charging times are estimates based on a com-
pletely discharged high voltage battery.
• Charging times will vary based on the age, condition,
state of charge and temperature of the high voltage
battery.
• Charging times may be longer if a thermal self-
protection reduces the charging current from the
EVSE.
Type of Charge Estimated Charge Time
Level 1 (120V/15A) Approximately 23 hours
Level 2 (240V/30A) Approximately 4 hours
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains a mechanical integrated key. To
use the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key
release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the transmission in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylin-
der.
Mechanical Key Release Button
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, place the transmission into PARK, and
remove the key fob from the ignition. When
leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor buttons.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the right.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK
sounds a signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Opera-
tion is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned
to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When
having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthor-
ized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Push the key fob lock button.
To Disarm The System
Push the key fob unlock button or cycle the ignition to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five sec-
onds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of
the unlock button on the key fob. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock
all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Key Fob
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release
the mechanical key to access the battery case screw
located on the side of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob
using a small screwdriver.
Mechanical Key Release Button
Key Fob Screw Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Reinstall the battery case inside the key fob and turn
the screw to lock it into place.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Battery Case Removed
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked
from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the
door handle is pushed, a red lock indicator will show on
the door handle (indicating locked). When the door is
open or closed, the door will lock.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, place the transmission into PARK, and
remove the key fob from the ignition. When
leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor buttons.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all of the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the
driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door
handle is pushed, a red lock indicator will show on the
driver’s door handle (indicating locked). When the
door is closed, the door will lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the
driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the
ignition.
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Door Lock Handle
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approximately one
second, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate
the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof open-
ing to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob or activate the power door lock switches located on
the front door handles.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Liftgate Handle
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
when the ignition switch is first in the AVV/START or
MAR/ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other
items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your au-
thorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions
to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the seat belt is flat against your body, without
twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly caus-
ing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt
into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dan-
gerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces
of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not pro-
tect you from injury during a collision. You are
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you
do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. In-
spect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide
you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the
center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6
inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretension-
ing devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretension-
ers work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. For additional information, refer to “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the
“Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is in-
stalled in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to re-
strain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wir-
ing associated with the electrical Air Bag System Com-
ponents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the fol-
lowing Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the igni-
tion switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag system.
The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunc-
tion. While the air bag system is designed to be main-
tenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condi-
tion the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the
steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel
or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC), which may receive information from the
front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemen-
tal Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIR-
BAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occu-
pants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side windows where
the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air
Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys
the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from
an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protec-
tion from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be prop-
erly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely in-
jured or killed.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed be-
low:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air
bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
friction rope burns or those you might get sliding
along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can-
not protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-
straint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off battery power to the motor.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
or until the hazard light button is pressed. The
hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the
hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After an event occurs requiring activation of the En-
hanced Accident Response System, when the system is
active, a “Service Electrical System” message will be
displayed on the instrument cluster. The vehicle is not
drivable in this state and must be towed to an autho-
rized dealer immediately to be inspected and have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired dur-
ing a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Own-
er’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat
are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave
it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seat-
backs and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on
the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under
an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must
always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of
the seat belt correctly.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint an-
chorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are used
to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Yes, all may be removed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of
the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to
the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at
LATCH Anchorages
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way
to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint
and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when us-
ing the seat belt to install a forward fac-
ing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Yes, all may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as
possible to keep the child as far from the advanced
passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no
top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where pos-
sible, route the tether strap under the head restraint
and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the
head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet har-
nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is
first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If
the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may cause your floor mat to interfere with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss
of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your
floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat
over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured
using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be
properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a
floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference,
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING! (Continued)
with the vehicle properly parked with the engine
off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and
the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interfer-
ence. If your floor mat interferes with the opera-
tion of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place
the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for
cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and
bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pres-
sure.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
coolant or other fluid leaks. If fluid leaks are suspected,
the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ...........................83
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................83
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . .83
▫ Power Mirrors .......................84
▫ Folding Mirrors.......................85
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........85
▫ Sun Visors ..........................86
䡵 SEATS ..............................86
▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment ...........86
▫ Recline Adjustment ....................87
▫ Seat Height Adjustment .................88
▫ EZ Entry Feature......................88
▫ Memory Feature ......................89
▫ Heated Seats ........................89
▫ Head Restraints ......................90
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ........92
䡵 LIGHTS .............................94
▫ Multifunction Lever....................94
▫ Headlights ..........................94
▫ High Beams .........................94
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................94
▫ Parking Lights .......................95
▫ Daytime Running Lights ................95
▫ Turn Signals ........................95
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................95
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay.........96
▫ Interior Lights .......................96
▫ Cargo Area Lights .....................97
3
▫ Dimmer Control ......................97
▫ Ambient Light .......................98
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............98
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....98
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........98
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper ................100
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . .101
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .....................101
▫ To Activate .........................102
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................102
▫ To Deactivate .......................102
▫ To Resume Speed ....................103
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ..............103
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ..............104
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST ....................104
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ...............104
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ..........105
▫ Failure Indications ....................106
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ......106
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions ......107
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......108
▫ To Open ...........................109
▫ To Close ...........................109
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ..................109
▫ Wind Buffeting ......................109
▫ Emergency Operation..................110
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped ..............110
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ..........110
䡵 CIGAR
LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED .........112
䡵 CUPHOLDERS .......................113
䡵 STORAGE ...........................114
▫ Glove Compartment...................114
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ...............114
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES .............115
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................115
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be re-
duced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror.
The on/off symbol on the button will illuminate when
the auto-dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust
a mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L
(left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Spotter Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visors can
be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both
sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. To view
the courtesy mirror, slide the mirror cover outward.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
Slide Courtesy Mirror Cover Outward
(Passenger Side Shown)
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss
of control which could cause a collision and
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly ad-
justed seat belt.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the
recline lever, lean back until the desired position has
been reached, and release the lever.
Adjusting Bar
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or
pump the lever downward to lower the seat height.
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the
release lever, located on the outboard side of the seat-
back, dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat
forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Height Adjuster
EZ Entry Lever
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memory Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back
And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle
and the track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back
is returned upright.
Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may
first be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will
then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory
position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory fea-
ture (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat
has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft
memory track position as described in Memory Func-
tion Option 1.
Heated Seats
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats
are located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Push the switch a second time to shut
the heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING! (Continued)
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of your
ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper posi-
tions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or re-
moved could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The driver and front passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact,
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return
to their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location out-
side the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may interfere
with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint
in the event of a collision and could result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever,
located on the left kick panel, rearward.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Hood Release Lever
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Slide the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, to the right. Then raise the
hood.
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the
engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the
hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open
position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the
prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and block
your vision. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Location
Hood Prop Rod
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches en-
gaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn sig-
nals.
NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever
upward to the first detent for headlight op-
eration.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever towards the instrument panel to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the
Headlight Operation
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
steering wheel. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position
and turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be
on with DRL.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off
using the display menus. Refer to “Uconnect settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster display will blink
to indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will
automatically turn off.
Turn Signal Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of
time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel within two minutes. Each
time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will
be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights
can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch
to the right from its center position and the lights are
always on. Push the switch to the left from its center
position and the lights are always off. Leave the switch
in the center position, and the lights are turned on and
off when the doors are opened or closed. The switch on
the right side of the overhead console controls the map
or reading function of the lights. Push the switch to the
right to turn on the right light and push the switch to
the left to turn on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the doors are locked with the key fob, the
lights will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15-minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Cargo Area Lights
There is also a courtesy light located in the rear cargo
area. Whenever the rear lift gate is opened, the light will
turn on and then turn off when the lift gate is closed.
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by pushing the buttons on the right side of
the instrument cluster. The + increases the brightness
and the — decreases the brightness. You can control
brightness of the radio by itself or the entire instrument
panel. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Cargo Light Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the
center stack. The ambient light will be on when the
headlights are turned on by rotating the end of the
multifunction lever.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog
lights off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only op-
erate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Fog Light Switch
Windshield Wiper Operation
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent,
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle
speed. As vehicle speed increases, the delay time will
decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The
wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue
until the lever is released. When the lever is released,
the wipers will return to the off position and automati-
cally shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the vehicle. If the
wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to
the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
CAUTION! (Continued)
to the off position. If the windshield wiper con-
trol is turned off and the blades cannot return to
the off position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will oper-
ate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers,
but at half the frequency. When the transmission is
placed into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically
operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation
when the transmission is placed out of REVERSE.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only op-
erate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the
wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after
the lever is released.
Rear Wiper Operation
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located
on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn
signal controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to
lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Tilt Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control system can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. The cruise control indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Speed Control without erasing
Speed Control Buttons
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is de-
pendent on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Set-
tings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is de-
pendant on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are wind-
ing, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST
The Rear Park Assist system provides audible indica-
tions of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when
the transmission is placed into REVERSE.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from ap-
proximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24
inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/
bumper, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that
would clear the underside of the vehicle during the
parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is acti-
vated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the
distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick
succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle.
A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 inches (30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’ field of
view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the Instrument Cluster
Display (where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is
not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if
the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the
signal is turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings
during maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon and message appearing
on the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a mes-
sage appears on the instrument cluster dis-
play (if equipped). Refer to ⬙Instrument Clus-
ter Display⬙ in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable,
without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled.
The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of
the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your sur-
roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will
be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be tempo-
rarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the overhead
console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts,
or any object to project through the sunroof
opening. Injury may result.
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Push the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open opera-
tion, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the
power sunroof button and hold it for approximately
one second, the sunroof will return to the vented
position. Pull the switch a second time and hold for
approximately one second to completely close the sun-
roof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove
compartment. There is a plug located in the rear of the
sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing
the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of
the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the
sunroof to the desired location.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move
the shade to a full open position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Manual Sun Shade
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power
Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the center console, in front of the cup
holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release
the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically
returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is
ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter
with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has
turned off.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are
located on the floor console between the front seats.
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of
the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove com-
partment latch to open the glove compartment. Push
the glove compartment door upward to close it.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its
folded-down position to provide a flat load floor cargo
area. When returning the seatback to its upright posi-
tion, push rearward until the seatback is properly
latched.
Glove Compartment Latch
Rear Seat Release Buttons
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in
the center of the instrument panel, below the
radio. Push this button to turn on the rear window
defroster. An indicator in the instrument panel cluster
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the de-
froster off, push the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Folded Rear Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES .........119
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................120
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..........121
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ......121
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights .............122
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ...........128
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ...........135
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ...........137
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ............137
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........138
▫ Instrument Cluster Display And Controls . . .138
▫ Display Menu Set-Up..................140
▫ Trip Computer ......................141
䡵 CYBERSECURITY......................143
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ..................144
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................144
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS .................145
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate...............145
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen.............145
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Settings ..........146
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0/5.0 NAV VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS .............155
▫ Introducing Uconnect..................155
▫ Get Started .........................155
▫ Basic Voice Commands ................156
▫ Radio .............................157
▫ Media.............................157
4
▫ Voice Text Reply .....................158
▫ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones.......159
▫ Harmful Interference Statement...........159
▫ Additional Information ................159
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .....159
▫ Radio Operation .....................160
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ...........................160
䡵 TELEMATICS MODEM..................161
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................161
▫ Automatic Temperature Control Overview . . .161
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ..........................166
▫ Operating Tips ......................167
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 5 — Central Air Vents 9 — Hazard Button 13 — ESC Off
2 — Voice Command Controls 6 — Storage Compartment 10 — Climate Controls 14 — Horn/Driver Airbag
3 — Instrument Cluster Display 7 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Power Window Controls
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer,
Trip Computer (Behind Steering
Wheel)
8 — Rear Defrost Button 12 — Heated Seat Controls/
Front Fog Light Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Battery Charge Gauge
• This gauge indicates the charge level of the battery.
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display shows messages,
when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Power Flow Gauge
This gauge indicates how battery energy is being used
by the vehicle:
• ECO Mode (Green): The vehicle is conserving en-
ergy.
• POWER Mode (Red): The vehicle is utilizing en-
ergy.
• CHARGE Mode (Purple): The vehicle is regenerat-
ing energy.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
English
Metric
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys-
tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If
the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-
tion.
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Plugged In Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Plugged In Indicator Light
This red indicator will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged in.
Plugged In Malfunction Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Plugged In Malfunction Indicator Light
This red indicator will illuminate if there is a malfunction or interruption during the vehicle
charging process.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
• Driver’s Door Open
• Passenger Door Open
• Driver and Passenger Door Open
Service Propulsion System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Propulsion System Warning Light
The Service Propulsion System Warning Light will illuminate if there is a malfunction de-
tected with the Propulsion System. If the light comes on or remains on while driving see
your authorized dealer.
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
EV System Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
EV System Malfunction Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when there is a malfunction in the Electric Vehicle (EV) Sys-
tem. If the EV System Malfunction Indicator light comes on while driving or charging see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the AVV/START position. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilo-
meters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned to AVV/START.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
• Each time the ignition is turned to AVV/START, the ESC system will be ON, even if it
was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair imme-
diately using the dedicated tire repair kit and con-
tact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al-
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an at-
tempt was made to break into the vehicle.
Regenerative Brake System (RBS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Regenerative Brake System (RBS) Indicator Light
If the light turns on and remains on while driving, it suggests that there is a potential prob-
lem with the Regenerative Brake System (RBS) and the need for system service. See your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Rear Defrost Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de-
froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Plugged In Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Plugged In Indicator Light
This green indicator will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged in.
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or
park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles (kilometers) in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
The instrument cluster display consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
• Range
Instrument Cluster Display
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The instrument cluster display control buttons are lo-
cated on the right side of the instrument cluster. There
are three control buttons that are used to navigate
through the instrument cluster display functions:
• “+” Up Button
• ⬙—” Down Button
• MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to return to the
main screen.
Push and release the “+” up button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options or
to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the “—” down button to scroll down-
ward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: The “+” up and “—” down buttons activate
different functions according to the following situa-
tions:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the
instrument cluster display will turn on the clock and the
miles or kilometers covered (if equipped) for a few
seconds.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
NOTE: When the Uconnect “Display Mode” feature is
set to “Auto” the instrument cluster display control
(+/-) buttons may be used to adjust the brightness of
the entire Instrument Panel (e.g. Instrument Cluster,
Radio, and Climate Controls). Refer to “Display” lo-
cated in “Uconnect Settings” for further information.
Display Menu Set-Up
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow
to access the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. Single pushes on the up arrow or down arrow
will scroll through the setup menu options. The menu
includes the following functions:
• Battery % Display
• Button Volume
• Stored Warnings
• Tutorial
• Connectivity ID
• Restore Factory Settings
• Exit Menu
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the
relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the up arrow and down arrow (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this
submenu option.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the previously
selected submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the
main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer
hold).
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster.
It displays trip information such as: average speed,
distance traveled, average energy, time traveled, motor
power, and tire pressure.
Trip Button
The TRIP button is located on the right steering column
stalk.
• A short button push scrolls through the user-
selectable information.
• A long button push resets.
The User-Selectable options are:
• Motor Power (Kilowatts)
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Tire Pressure
Trip Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button manually.
• When the “Trip Distance” reaches 9999.9 miles/
kilometers or when the “Elapsed Time” reaches 29.59
(29 hours and 59 minutes) the system will reset
automatically.
• Trip can also be reset remotely through the radio.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• distance
• avg. energy
• avg. speed
• elapsed time (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• distance
• avg. energy
• avg. speed
• elapsed time (driving time)
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with
the remaining battery charge, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear when the system is initializing.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
roads, etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last
reset.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Energy
This value shows the vehicle’s average energy con-
sumption as a function of the overall time elapsed since
the last reset.
Elapsed Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and fea-
tures in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlaw-
ful access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Simi-
lar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential
risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly contain
malicious software, and if installed in your ve-
hicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
WARNING! (Continued)
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho-
rized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regard-
ing software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and mini-
mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully inter-
cept information and private communications without
your consent. For further information, refer to “On-
board Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center
console.
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable fea-
tures. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90),
push the center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen
And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0/5.0 NAV Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to dis-
play the settings menu screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
feature settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
and make your selection. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen
or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “AVV/ACC” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE: When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Auto” the radio touchscreen’s brightness will be adjusted
with all other instrument panel displays and lights when they are adjusted using the instrument cluster display
buttons on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster display. When the “Display Mode” feature is set to
“Manual” the radio screen brightness can be adjusted independently using the “Brightness” feature below.
Brightness +–
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Charge Low Pop-Up On Off
NOTE: When in the “Charge Low Pop-Up” display, you may turn on or shut off a low charge indicator.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen,
you may select each unit of measure independently
displayed in the instrument cluster display. The follow-
ing selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Changes the instrument cluster display to US units of measure.
Metric Changes the instrument cluster display to Metric units of measure.
After pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen,
you may select from the following menu items:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Distance mi km
Pressure psi kPa
Temperature °C °F
Energy MPGe mi/kWh km/kWH KM/Le
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Voice
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date Set Date
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When in the “Sync Time” display, you may sync the time with GPS.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Charging Schedule
To set up a charging schedule, press the “More” or
“Settings” button on the touchscreen.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Enable Schedule
NOTE:
Continue setting up the schedule, picking from the following menus:
•
Weekdays or Weekends
•
Start and End Times
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following setting will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button, you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is se-
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min. 20 min.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in the “Balance/ Fade” display, you may adjust the Balance settings.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE: When the “Auto-On Radio” feature is selected, the radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off With Door On Off
NOTE: When the “Radio Off With Door” feature is selected, the radio will remain on until the driver or pas-
senger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay time expires.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel us-
ing one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset
is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on,
except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
•
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
•
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed
on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Set-
tings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Once the settings are re-
stored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default⬙.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” but-
ton on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To
remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to clear all personal data?” Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal
data cleared”.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT 5.0/5.0 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect
system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or PHONE button and
saying a Voice Command from current category.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push to MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV VR
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio
trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say Help. The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits;
Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect sys-
tem.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the PHONE button
. After the beep, say... “Re-
ply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow
the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Media
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implemen-
tation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
Harmful Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the
wheel to access the switches.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TELEMATICS MODEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3G CDMA cellular
modem to connect the vehicle with your device to
provide the following features:
• Range and State of Charge Information
• Configure Scheduled Charging Profile
• Average and total energy used
• Charge station location and availability on in vehicle
NAV map
• Send navigation destination to vehicle from within
Mobile App
• Remote Door Lock/Unlock
• Remote Horn and Lights Activation
• Pre-conditioning of interior temperature
• Email and SMS notifications
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Temperature Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-
tion for maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If
the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Blower Control Up And Down Button
Provides the passengers with blower control. Push the UP button to increase blower speed.
Push the DOWN button to decrease blower speed.
Modes Control: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-
lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. To access this mode, press
both the Panel and Floor Mode buttons
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of
the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Off Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Temperature Up And Down Button
Provides the passengers with temperature control. Push the Up button on the faceplate for
warmer temperature settings. Push the Down button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high hu-
midity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pushing the Recirculation
control button. The recirculation indicator will illumi-
nate when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Auto-
matic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will
remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower
will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being
used in the manual mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DE-
FROST mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recom-
mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selec-
tion.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ...............173
▫ Single-Speed Transmission ..............173
▫ Normal Starting......................173
䡵 SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION..........174
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock..............175
▫ Gear Ranges ........................176
▫ Auto Park..........................178
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ........178
▫ Acceleration ........................178
▫ Traction ...........................179
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ............179
▫ Flowing/Rising Water .................179
▫ Shallow Standing Water ................180
䡵 POWER STEERING ....................180
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .....................181
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ......................183
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . .183
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . .183
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ..............184
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ...........185
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .........185
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light ...........187
▫ Regenerative Braking System (RBS) ........188
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ............189
▫ Tire Markings .......................189
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)..........192
▫ T
ire Terminology And Definitions .........193
5
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ..........194
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .......198
▫ Tire Pressure .......................198
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................199
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . .200
▫ Radial Ply Tires .....................200
▫ Tire Types ..........................201
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ............202
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ..............202
▫ Tire Spinning .......................204
▫ Tread Wear Indicators .................205
▫ Life Of Tire ........................206
▫ Replacement Tires ....................206
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......207
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .208
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......209
▫ Treadwear..........................209
▫ Traction Grades ......................209
▫ Temperature Grades...................210
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM........210
▫ TPM System ........................213
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings ..........................213
▫ TPMS Warning ......................214
▫ General Information ..................215
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ....................215
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..................216
▫ T
owing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ...........................216
䡵 EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER
CHARGE............................216
▫ Driver Behavior Gauge.................217
▫ Range Projection .....................218
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Single-Speed Transmission
The transmission must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the vehicle. Apply the
brakes when selecting a transmission gear from Park.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before selecting
a transmission gear.
Normal Starting
Turn the key to the START position while your vehicle
is in PARK. When the ignition key is turned to the
START and then released to the RUN position, a chime
will sound and the “READY” indicator in the instru-
ment cluster display will illuminate to indicate the
500e’s Electric Drive System has started. When the
“READY” indicator is illuminated your 500e is ready to
be driven.
“READY” Indicator
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
NOTE:
• If the key is held in the START position for more than
10 seconds “READY” mode will not be achieved.
Return the key to OFF position, and then back to the
START position and hold for less than 10 seconds to
achieve “READY”.
• If the “READY” indicator fails to illuminate after you
have followed the normal starting procedure contact
your authorized dealer.
SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION
Your 500e uses a Single-Speed Transmission to direct
the output from the electric motor. The single-speed
transmission is operated using push-buttons instead of
a traditional gear selector.
The push-buttons are located on the lower instrument
panel.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the fol-
lowing precautions are not observed:
• Place the transmission into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Place the transmission into or out of REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Before placing the transmission into any range
make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Single-Speed Transmission Push-Buttons
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting in or out of PARK.
• If all push-button LEDs are on when the key is ON,
see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• Only place the transmission into gear when your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle
is in “READY” mode. Before exiting a vehicle,
always apply the parking brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission range buttons.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
The key can only be removed from the ignition when
the ignition is in the OFF position, and once removed,
the transmission is locked in PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Gear Ranges
Push the desired push button to shift into gear.
NOTE:
• The brake pedal must be depressed to select a
transmission gear.
• After selecting any gear, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating.
PARK (P)
The PARK selection supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The vehicle can be started in
this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in PARK.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the park-
ing brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the transmission into PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
NOTE: Refer to the transmission range position dis-
played in the instrument cluster and verify that it
indicates the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift the trans-
mission into gear when your foot is firmly press-
ing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle
is in “ready mode”. Before exiting a vehicle,
(Continued)
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
always apply the parking brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission range buttons.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
REVERSE (R)
This gear is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The vehicle may be started in this gear. Apply the
parking brake and place the transmission into PARK if
you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traf-
fic or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
Use this gear for all city and highway driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Auto Park
The Auto Park feature automatically places the trans-
mission into PARK if there is any indication that the
driver may leave the vehicle while the transmission is in
D (DRIVE), N (NEUTRAL) or R (REVERSE).
Auto Park is enabled under the following conditions:
• Key On (12 Volt ON and High Voltage OFF) or
READY mode (12 Volt ON and High Voltage ON).
• Vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h).
NOTE:
• Auto Park is enabled (only once) at the beginning of
each key cycle and is re-enabled each time the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
• Auto Park is disabled above 2 mph (3 km/h) and
transmission range will be maintained.
The instrument cluster will display an Auto Shift To
Park message and chime once when Auto Park is
activated.
Mode Of Operation With Key ON:
Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in
DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the following
conditions are detected:
• Seat Belt is unlatched
• Brake pedal is released
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h)
Mode Of Operation With Key OFF:
Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in
DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., transmis-
sion, coolant, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears con-
taminated, as this may result in further damage.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving.
If the electric steering system experiences a fault that
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power
steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself
and others. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” message is displayed on the in-
strument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the power steering
system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and
let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING - ASSIST OFF⬙ messages are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, the vehicle needs to be taken
to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly
as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission push but-
tons.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury.
Parking Brake
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event regenerative braking or power assist is lost
for any reason the brakes will still function. The effort
required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more
than that required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of
the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light
during brake use.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions and
are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer
to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel
lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery sur-
faces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turn-
ing the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if
the fault detected was only momentary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop
as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping se-
quence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer de-
sired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and vehicle
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature
remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial
Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in this section for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Vehicle power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by
the driver and compares it to the actual path of the
vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or under-
steer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located on the instrument
panel.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction af-
forded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also can-
not prevent collisions resulting from loss of ve-
hicle control due to inappropriate driver input for
the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Changes to the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel size may
adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also de-
grade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-
tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
mode by pushing the switch. Once the situation requir-
ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing
the switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functional-
ity of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section), has been disabled
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine
power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four sec-
onds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the vehicle operating
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)
Your 500e has a Regenerative Braking System
(RBS). The RBS reduces the high voltage
battery consumption of the vehicle, particu-
larly in stop-and-go city traffic. The electric
motors which propel the vehicle forward can operate as
generators when braking. The RBS recharges the high
voltage battery under certain braking conditions by
recapturing energy that would otherwise be lost while
braking. The electric power that is generated goes back
into the high voltage battery for later use, for example
when acceleration is desired.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The
RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service
brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled mainte-
nance, and service intervals for the vehicle service
brakes must be followed.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the
tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on
the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire
flexing and can result in over-heating and tire
failure. Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck
holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control. Always drive with each
tire inflated to the recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Start-
ing And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire
Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Infor-
mation kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Energy Consumption
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stabil-
ity of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Energy Consumption
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher battery charge consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pres-
sure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or origi-
nal equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or
if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also
creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do
so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
listed on your Tire and Loading Information Plac-
ard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread
depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire fail-
ure. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected regu-
larly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your
tire will be found on the original equipment tire side-
wall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel,
make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of
the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Fail-
ure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
• Install on Front Tires
• Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict-
able handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between
tires and other suspension components, it is im-
portant that only chains in good condition are
used. Broken chains can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the dam-
aged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about ½
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
lower suggested operating speed of the chain
manufacturer if different from the speed recom-
mended by the manufacture.
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and con-
tribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The front and rear wheels are different sizes and cannot
be used in place of each other. Rotate the wheels
“side-to-side” as shown in the diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were estab-
lished by the National Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on
the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no adjust-
ment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving
the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
CAUTION! (Continued)
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
• Under-inflation also reduces the high voltage battery
range and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
• It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
TPM System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to
each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a low pressure graphic showing
the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different
color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
mation.
Low Tire Indicator
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the instrument cluster
for approximately 5 seconds.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service TPM
System” message will no longer display.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same radio frequen-
cies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace-
ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on
and a chime will sound. In addition, the highlighted
graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a
low pressure text message and a pressure value in a
different color.
Service TPM System Message
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System” message.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “Service TPM System” message.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Single-Speed Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• This vehicle must be towed on a dolly or vehicle
trailer with the front wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER
CHARGE
The drive system and cabin temperature management
features use the most energy from the high voltage
battery. Reducing energy draw from these features are
the easiest and most effective way to extend driving
range.
The 500e uses high voltage components to heat and cool
the cabin, so when using automatic climate control,
consider setting temperatures a few degrees higher or
lower during hot and cold days. If your 500e has been
soaking in hot or cold temperatures for an extended
period, it is recommended that the car be precondi-
tioned using the Uconnect Access smartphone app
while still plugged into a charging source. This will
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
allow 500e to use external power to establish a comfort-
able cabin temperature before the drive and allow the
battery to maintain the temperature at significantly
lower energy levels.
Additional tips:
• Keep tires properly inflated
• When practical, choose surface streets over the high-
way, and work to maintain a steady speed
• Avoid carrying nonessential cargo
• Be mindful of adding external accessories that may
increase aerodynamic drag
• Perform all scheduled maintenance at recommended
intervals
Driver Behavior Gauge
To help the driver extend the driving range of the high
voltage battery your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Behavior Gauge. The Driver Behavior Gauge is located
on the right side of the instrument cluster and contains
three driving ranges:
• Power
The needle will move into the Power range when under
acceleration.
• ECO
The needle will move into the ECO range when you are
maximizing the driving range of the high voltage
battery.
• Charge
The needle will move into the Charge range when
battery regeneration is active (either coasting or brak-
ing).
Driver Behavior Gauge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Range Projection
This area of the cluster is used to display the projected
range considering current battery charge and previous
energy use. The two arrows to the left of the mileage are
used to forecast the effect of recent driving.
• When both arrows are grey, expect the range to drop
approximately one mile for each mile driven.
• When the up arrow is highlighted, expect the range
number to hold steady or increase while driving.
• When the down arrow is highlighted, expect the
range number to decrease more than one mile for
each mile driven.
Range Projection Indicators
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........220
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .....................220
▫ Torque Specifications ..................220
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ........222
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage ................222
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation .........................222
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ........223
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .......225
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
(12 VOLT BATTERY ONLY)...............230
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start .............230
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ...............231
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............233
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...............233
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..........235
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................236
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..........236
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncom-
ing traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is
disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
220 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 221
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire.
Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear cargo area.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2—
Deflation Button
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
222 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
(6) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed
at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after
each use. Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 223
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the
material from the vehicle or tire and wheel compo-
nents. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled
off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating
such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The
Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service
Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these
(Continued)
224 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
warnings can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It
causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult
a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6)
and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the
best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem
in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the
ignition in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 225
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1)
through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn on the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning on the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
226 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire imme-
diately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the
driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the De-
flation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is
at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 227
CAUTION! (Continued)
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internal Tire Service Kit components which may
cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the
tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within
the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You
Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire and loading information label on the driver-side
door opening.
228 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating
the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in
the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 229
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE (12 VOLT
BATTERY ONLY)
If your vehicle has a discharged 12 Volt battery, it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is fro-
zen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, power
electronics or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the underhood
compartment under the beauty cover. To access the
battery pull upward on the cover.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Negative (-) Post
230 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, place the transmission into
PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary elec-
trical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+)
battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property damage
due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster ve-
hicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 231
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle underhood compartment)
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting elec-
trical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the spe-
cific ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your ve-
hicle, you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at your authorized dealer.
232 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to trans-
mission overheating and failure. It can also dam-
age the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 233
WARNING! (Continued)
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
by the parking brake or other means. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or
around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available. If a dead 12
volt battery is the cause of the condition refer to “Jump
Start Procedure — 12 Volt Battery” before performing
the Manual Park Release.
To perform the Manual Park Release follow these steps:
1. To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
2. If possible, raise the front driver’s side of the vehicle
to provide access to the transmission.
3. Working from underneath the vehicle, remove the
black rubber plug from the front of the Park module
(a black canister mounted on the front of the trans-
mission).
4. Using a T25 driver bit, rotate the Manual Park
Release shaft (located just behind the rubber plug)
clockwise, at least 20 turns, to release the Park
mechanism. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can
be moved.
5. Reinstall the rubber plug.
6. Release the parking brake only when a driver is in
the vehicle, or the vehicle is secured by other means.
The Manual Park Release will be reset automatically
once the vehicle is restarted.
Manual Park Release Location
234 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground SINGLE-SPEED TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Flatbed ALL OK
This vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/
RUN mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery
is discharged, see “Manual Park Release” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 235
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
236 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT ..........239
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY .....................240
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS .................240
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ....................240
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ..........241
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems..................242
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Coolant Level
Check.............................242
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Cooling Pressure
Caps .............................244
▫ Selection Of Coolant ..................244
▫ Adding Coolant......................245
▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Drain, Flush And
Refill .............................246
▫ Disposal Of Used Power Electronics And
Battery Thermal Management Systems
Coolant ...........................246
▫ Points To Remember ..................246
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt .........247
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............248
▫ Body Lubrication ....................249
▫ Wiper Blades .......................249
▫ Adding Washer Fluid .................251
▫ Brake System .......................251
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ..........................252
䡵 FUSES .............................259
7
▫ Interior Fuses .......................259
▫ Power Distribution Center #1 ............262
▫ Power Distribution Center (PDC) #2 .......264
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ...................265
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ................266
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT .................267
▫ Interior Bulbs .......................267
▫ Exterior Bulbs .......................267
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ...................269
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBES, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . .270
238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT
1 — Battery Thermal Coolant Reservoir 4 — Fuses
2 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir 5 — 12V Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emis-
sions controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled mainte-
nance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to
genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
WARNING!
Your vehicle has both a high voltage DC and AC
system as well as a 12 Volt system. DC and AC high
voltage are both extremely dangerous and can cause
severe burns, electric shock, serious injury or even
death. In order to avoid personal injuries:
• DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES (ORANGE COLORED) AND/OR THE
CONNECTORS.
• Follow all Caution and Warning labels attached to
the High Voltage components.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not remove or replace any of the 500e System
components. All replacement or repairs of 500e
System components should be performed by a
factory-trained technician at an authorized dealer.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed
your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the
future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended mainte-
nance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in
these components as the chemicals can damage
them. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems
The Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Manage-
ment Systems are completely separate and designed to
regulate temperature for the high voltage battery and
the electric components.
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Coolant Level Check
The coolant expansion bottles provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the vehicle off and coolant at ambient
temperature, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottles should be between the bottom and top lines
marked “MIN-MAX FILL RANGE”.
As long as the vehicle operating temperature is satis-
factory, the coolant bottles need only be checked once a
month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottles. Do not overfill.
Coolant MIN/MAX
242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Man-
agement Systems coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable).
Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technol-
ogy) and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion
protection.
Check the coolant bottles tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at
the bottles and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumu-
lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES-
SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see
or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Cooling Pressure Caps
The caps must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant (antifreeze).
The caps should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
NOTE:
• The pressure caps on the reservoirs are unique and
rated at 5 PSI caps.
• Use only Mopar replacement parts.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety
precaution. Never add coolant (antifreeze) when
the cooling system is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated cooling
system. Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do
not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
vehicle damage may result.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(antifreeze), may result in cooling system damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant is different
and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant
(antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use
of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with cooling systems that
allow extended maintenance intervals. This coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing
this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same coolant (antifreeze) throughout the
life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Or-
ganic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze).
When adding coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34ºF
(-37ºC) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water and coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
cooling systems.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to
maintain the proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease
the life of the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal
Management Systems coolant (antifreeze) and will re-
quire more frequent coolant (antifreeze) changes.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245
Power Electronics And Battery Thermal
Management Systems — Drain, Flush And Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
If the coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a consid-
erable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old coolant (antifreeze) solution.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to have the cooling systems
serviced at your authorized dealer. Failure to do so
could result in poor cooling system performance
and/or vehicle damage.
Disposal Of Used Power Electronics And
Battery Thermal Management Systems Coolant
Used antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your community. To
prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store
antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a
physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Points To Remember
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle OFF and disconnect the fan motor
lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan may start without warning,
whether the ignition is on or off.
If an examination of your underhood compartment
shows no evidence of cooler or hose leaks, the vehicle
may be safely driven.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottles.
246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the coolant
recovery bottles. If coolant (antifreeze) needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottles must also
be protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant (antifreeze) additions are re-
quired, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50%
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled/
deionized water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant control systems recovery
bottles overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the coolant control systems clean. If
your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free 12
Volt battery. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do
not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer
to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a 12 Volt Low Voltage Battery System “fast
charger” is used while the battery is in the ve-
hicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and air condi-
tioning performance tests.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-
ing system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Warranty Information Book, located on the
DVD, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refriger-
ant or any repair requiring lines to be discon-
nected should be done by an experienced techni-
cian.
248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latch-
ing components to ensure proper function. When per-
forming other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned
and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a
sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road
film, and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on
to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out
of contact with petroleum products.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-
tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
Removing The Wiper Blade
1—WiperBlade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
underhood compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not coolant/antifreeze).
Refer to “Underhood Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer sol-
vents are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or work-
ing around the washer solution.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the
brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” is on and the parking
brake is not applied.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be
checked when the pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may
be needed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden
brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot vehicle parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will en-
able you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are
well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the
wheel surface.
254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. These products and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment
or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products
on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-
ucts may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes
before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the
brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They
will permanently damage this finish and such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255
CAUTION! (Continued)
Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis;
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with
any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners
to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Keton based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface
which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your
vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with
a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
(Continued)
258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a colli-
sion if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-
tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door
Courtesy Lights
3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket, Climate Control System,
Tire Pressure Monitor, TCU
6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam
9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
10 F51 5 Amp Tan Climate Control System, Stop Light, Exterior
Mirrors, Sunroof Switch
11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, Electric Mirror, Parking Sen-
sor, Sunroof Switch
13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition, Climate Control, RDU and EVCU
14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fuse for the heated mirrors is located behind an
access panel on the front of the Instrument Panel.
NOTE: This fuse is a single fuse attached directly to the
wire harness.
1 — Heated Mirror Fuse 2 — Access Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F90 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors
F90 Fuse Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 261
Power Distribution Center #1
The Power Distribution Center #1 is located on the right
side of the underhood compartment. To access the
fuses, remove locking screw and slide cover off.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Control Module (BCM)
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Brake System Module Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Front Distribution Unit
262 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F06 60 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan
F07 40 Amp Orange – Regen Brake Module
F08 40 Amp Orange – HVAC
F09 – 5 Amp Tan Air Electric Heater
Charge Indicator
F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU)
F14 – 5 Amp Tan High Beam (Shutter)
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter, AUX Power Outlet
F16 – 10 Amp Red Humidity Sensor
VPAM
AC Compressor
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU)
F19 – 10 Amp Red HVAC
F20 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats – If Equipped
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F23 – 25 Amp Clear Anti-Lock Brake Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown EPS
YAW Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 263
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F81 30 Amp Green – Electronic Shifter (ESM)
F82 30 Amp Green – Sunroof
F84 – 25 Amp Clear Regen Brake Module
F85 30 Amp Green – Rear Window Heater
F87 – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Shifter (ESM)
Power Distribution Center (PDC) #2
The Power Distribution Center #2 is located next to the
battery in the underhood compartment. To access the
fuses, pull the release tabs and remove the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
FPT9 – 15 Amp Blue Battery Pack Control Module (BPCM)
Power Inverter Module (PIM)
FPT13 – 10 Amp Red EAC (AC Compressor)
PDC #2
264 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
On Board Charging Module (OBCM)
FPT16 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
FPT17 – 10 Amp Red EAC (AC Compressor)
Radiator Fan
FPT20 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Description
FPT3 25 Amp White Battery Coolant Pump
FPT5 20 Amp Lt. Blue Inverter Coolant Pump
FPT6 40 Amp Green Supply for fuses F9, F13, F16, F17
and F20
VEHICLE STORAGE
The preferred way of storing your vehicle for a long
period of time is to leave it attached to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger. The vehicle has a wake-up feature that will
wake the system every 3 weeks and do a maintenance
charge on the 12 Volt battery and also top off the high
voltage battery if necessary.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the air conditioning sys-
tem is started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 265
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Rear Cargo Lamps W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps WY5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
266 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See authorized dealer)
License Plate Lamps LED (See authorized dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Interior Bulbs
Rear Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool open the light box.
2. Pull the bulb out.
3. Replace the bulb, and reinstall the light box cover.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo-
spheric conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the head-
lamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or
right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 267
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized
dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the hous-
ing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
Wheel Housing Access Door
268 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from
the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by push-
ing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight
out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening
screws.
2.
Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and
replace it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Systems U.S. Metric
Power Electronics Cooling System 3.6 Quarts 3.5 Liters
Battery Thermal Management Cooling System 7.0 Quarts 6.7 Liters
Single-Speed Transmission 0.8 Quart 750 ml
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 269
FLUIDS, LUBES, AND GENUINE PARTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Refrigerant Mopar R134a
Compressor Lubricant Mopar POE Oil or Equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12727
Single-Speed Transmission Castrol BOT 533
270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in cooling system damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use
of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Once A Month Or Before A Trip:
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for un-
usual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoirs and
brake master cylinder
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Service Interval:
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
• Inspect battery cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Check and adjust hand brake.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
274 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and re-
place if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. Re-
place as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect parking brake function.
Adjust as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Flush and replace the coolant in
the Power Electronics and Bat-
tery Thermal Loop Systems at
10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 275
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to
perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
276 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..................278
▫ Prepare For The Appointment............278
▫ Prepare A List .......................278
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............278
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............278
▫ FIAT Customer Center .................279
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center ...........279
▫ In Mexico Contact ....................279
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .......279
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............280
▫ Service Contract .....................280
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............281
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........281
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C......................281
▫ In Canada..........................281
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........282
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring
the right papers with you, as well as your warranty
folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the ser-
vice manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history, as this can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental,
it is advisable to make these arrangements when you
call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s cus-
tomer center.
278 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 279
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If
you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
280 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of com-
ponent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Depart-
ment immediately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 281
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-
formation that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightfor-
ward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manu-
als make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. In-
cluded are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
• Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Washer Fluid .....................251
AirBag................................50
Advance Front Air Bag ...................50
Air Bag Operation ......................52
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................53
Enhanced Accident Response ..............236
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............236
FrontAirBag..........................50
If A Deployment Occurs ..................57
Knee Impact Bolsters ....................53
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...........59
Transporting Pets .......................75
Air Bag Light ........................76, 122
Air Bag Maintenance ......................59
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................248
Air Conditioning Filter ....................168
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .............167
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ................248
Air Conditioning System................166, 248
Air Pressure, Tires........................199
Alarm
Disarm The System .....................31
Vehicle Security Alarm ...................31
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................31
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..............6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...............183
Anti-Lock Warning Light .........128, 132, 133, 134
Appearance Care ........................252
Audio Systems (Radio) ....................144
Automatic Dimming Mirror..................83
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........166
Automatic Transaxle .......................28
Automatic Transmission ...................174
Gear Ranges ..........................176
Battery ............................127, 247
Charging System Light ..................127
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..............33
Belts, Seat ..............................76
Body Mechanism Lubrication................249
B-Pillar Location .........................194
Brake Assist System ......................184
Brake Fluid ............................270
Brake,
Parking ..........................181
Brakes ................................251
Brake System ...........................251
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................183
Master Cylinder .......................251
Parking .............................181
Warning Light ........................123
284 INDEX
Bulb Replacement.....................266, 267
Bulbs, Light..........................79, 266
Capacities, Fluid .........................269
Cargo Area Features ......................114
Car Washes ............................253
Cellular Phone ..........................160
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................190
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............76
Checks, Safety ...........................76
Child Restraint ...........................60
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................64
Child Restraints ........................60
Child Seat Installation ....................72
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......70
Infants And Child Restraints ...............62
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......66
Older Children And Child Restraints .........63
Seating Positions .......................65
Cleaning
Wheels .............................254
Climate Control .........................161
Manual .............................161
Clutch ................................251
Clutch Fluid ............................251
Compact Spare Tire.......................203
Connector
UCI................................144
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........144
Contract, Service.........................280
Cooling System
Coolant Capacity ......................269
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........270
Corrosion Protection ......................252
Cruise Control (Speed Control)...............101
Cruise Light ..................125, 126, 136, 137
Cupholders ............................113
Customer Assistance ......................278
Customer Programmable Features ............146
Daytime Running Lights ....................95
Dealer Service...........................240
Defroster, Windshield ......................77
Disarming,
Security System ..................31
Door Ajar ..........................126, 127
Door Ajar Light ......................126, 127
Door Locks .............................35
Door Locks, Automatic .....................36
10
INDEX 285
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ...............................179
Electrical Power Outlets....................110
Electric Remote Mirrors.....................84
Electronic Brake Control System
Brake Assist System ....................184
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .............185
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .................220
Towing .............................235
Engine
Compartment .........................239
Starting .............................173
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........236
Exterior Lights ...........................79
Filters
Air Conditioning ......................168
Flashers
Turn Signal ........................79, 135
Fluid Leaks .............................79
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..........270
Fog Lights ..............................98
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ....................233
Fuses .................................259
Gear Ranges ............................176
General Information ......................215
General Maintenance......................241
Glass Cleaning ..........................257
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ........................179
Headlights ..............................94
Cleaning ............................257
Passing ..............................94
Switch ...............................94
Head Restraints ..........................90
Heated Mirrors...........................85
Heated Seats ............................89
Holder, Cup ............................113
Hood Release............................92
Ignition ................................28
Key.................................28
Ignition Key Removal ......................28
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................29
286 INDEX
Instrument Cluster ....................121, 135
Instrument Cluster .....................120
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ............120, 138
Instrument Panel And Controls ..............119
Instrument Panel Cover....................258
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..............258
Interior Appearance Care...................256
Interior Lighting..........................96
Key Fob
Disarm The Alarm ......................31
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .33
Key-In Reminder .........................29
Key, Replacement .........................30
Keys ..................................28
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................29
Lane Change Assist .......................95
Lap/Shoulder Belts........................41
Latches ................................79
Hood ...............................92
Leaks, Fluid .............................79
Life Of Tires ............................206
Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................38
Light Bulbs ..........................79, 266
Lights...............................79, 94
AirBag...........................76, 122
Brake Assist Warning ...................187
Brake Warning ........................123
Bulb Replacement ......................267
Cruise ....................125, 126, 136, 137
Exterior ..............................79
High Beam ...........................94
Park .............................95, 135
Passing ..............................94
Seat Belt Reminder .....................122
Service ..............................267
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........130
Traction Control .......................187
Turn Signal .....................79, 95, 135
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....135
Loading Vehicle
Tires ...............................194
Locks
Automatic Door ........................36
Door ................................
35
Power Door ...........................36
Lubrication, Body ........................249
10
INDEX 287
Lug Nuts ..............................220
Maintenance Free Battery...................247
Maintenance, General .....................241
Maintenance Procedures ...................241
Maintenance Schedule .....................274
Manual, Service .........................282
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ...................251
Mirrors ................................83
Automatic Dimming .....................83
Electric Powered .......................84
Heated ..............................85
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..............6
Multi-Function Control Lever ................94
Occupant Restraints .......................38
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,282
Paint Care .............................252
Parking Brake...........................181
Passing Light ............................94
Pets...................................75
Placard, Tire And Loading Information......194, 195
Power
Door Locks ...........................36
Mirrors ..............................84
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........110
Steering .............................180
Sunroof .............................108
Windows .............................37
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..............46
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................47
Radial Ply Tires .........................200
Radio Frequency
General Information ..................30, 34
Radio Operation .........................160
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ......................38
Rear Window Features.....................115
Recreational Towing ......................216
Release, Hood ...........................92
Reminder, Seat Belt........................40
Remote Keyless Entry
Disarm The Alarm ......................31
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........159
Replacement Bulbs .......................266
Replacement
Keys ........................30
288 INDEX
Replacement Parts........................240
Replacement Tires........................206
Reporting Safety Defects ...................281
Restraint, Head ..........................90
Restraints, Child..........................60
Rotation, Tires ..........................208
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................78
Safety Defects, Reporting ...................281
Safety Information, Tire ....................189
Safety Tips..............................76
Schedule, Maintenance ....................274
Seat Belt
Energy Management Feature ...............47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..............43
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................41
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............45
Pregnant Women .......................46
Seat Belt Extender ......................46
Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................47
Seat Belt Reminder ......................40
Seat Belt Maintenance .....................258
Seat Belt Reminder ........................40
Seat Belts ............................40, 76
Child Restraint .........................60
Extender .............................46
Front Seat .......................40, 41, 43
Inspection ............................76
Operating Instructions ...................43
Pregnant Women .......................46
Pretensioners ..........................47
Rear Seat .............................41
Reminder ............................122
Untwisting Procedure ....................45
Seats ..................................86
Adjustment ...........................86
Heated ..............................89
Security Alarm
Disarm The System .....................31
Security Alarm .........................31
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............270
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................29
Service Assistance ........................278
Service Contract .........................280
Service Manuals .........................282
Shoulder
Belts ...........................41
Signals, Turn ......................79, 95, 135
Snow Tires .............................202
Spare Tire .......................202, 203, 204
10
INDEX 289
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..........................104
Resume .............................103
Speed Control (Cruise Control)...............101
Starting ...............................173
Steering
Power ..............................180
Tilt Column ..........................101
Wheel, Tilt ...........................101
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............159
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .159
Storage, Vehicle .........................168
Stuck, Freeing...........................233
Sun Roof ..............................108
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag ........50
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .........166
Tilt Steering Column ......................101
Tire And Loading Information Placard ......194, 195
Tire Markings ...........................189
Tires.....................78, 198, 202, 203, 209
Aging (Life Of Tires) ....................206
Air Pressure .......................194, 198
Compact Spare ........................203
General Information ..............198, 202, 203
High Speed ..........................200
Inflation Pressures .....................199
Life Of Tires ..........................206
Load Capacity .....................194, 195
Pressure Warning Light ..................130
Quality Grading .......................209
Radial ..............................200
Replacement ..........................206
Rotation .............................208
Safety ...........................189, 198
Sizes ...............................190
Snow Tires ...........................202
Spare Tire .....................202, 203, 204
Spinning ............................204
T
read Wear Indicators ...................205
Tire Safety Information ....................189
Tire Service Kit .........222, 223, 225, 226, 228, 229
To Open Hood ...........................92
Towing ...............................215
Disabled Vehicle .......................235
Recreational ..........................216
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ..........216
Traction............................178, 179
Traction Control .........................185
Trailer Towing ..........................215
290 INDEX
Transaxle
Automatic ............................28
Transmission
Automatic ...........................174
Fluid ...............................270
Transporting Pets .........................75
Tread Wear Indicators .....................205
Turn Signals .........................95, 135
UCI Connector ..........................144
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................209
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . .144
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............45
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............5
Vehicle Loading .........................195
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............6
Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming .............31
Vehicle Storage ..........................168
Warnings And Cautions .....................5
Warranty Information .....................281
Washers, Windshield ...................98, 100
Washing Vehicle .........................253
Water
Driving Through .......................179
Wheel And Wheel Trim ....................254
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ................254
Wind Buffeting .......................37, 109
Window Fogging ........................168
Windows ...............................37
Power ...............................37
Windshield Defroster ......................77
Windshield Washers....................98, 100
Windshield Wiper Blades...................249
Windshield Wipers ........................98
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................249
10
INDEX 291
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT
®
500e
FIAT
®
500e
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17BEV24-126-AA
2374727 2017 Domestic Fiat 500E OM Cover.indd 1 6/8/16 8:29 AM
16BEV24-126-AC
Third Edition
